Dodge 2014 Charger Srt Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Dodge Dodge-2014-Dodge-Charger-Srt-Owners-Manual-814598 dodge-2014-dodge-charger-srt-owners-manual-814598 dodge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 620

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2014 Charger SRT

OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
14D482-126-AA

2014

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Charger
SRT

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .57

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .58

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .61

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .69
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .100

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
SENTRY KEY®
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.

Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.

General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- • This device may not cause harmful interference.
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
• This device must accept any interference that may be
authorized dealer.
received, including interference that may cause undeCustomer Key Programming
sired operation.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
performed at an authorized dealer.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

To Arm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
And Operating⬙ for further information).
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will promake sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the
will flash.
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
further information).
information.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
(RKE) transmitter.
position.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
key to the ON position.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
NOTE:
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
Tamper Alert
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
Security Alarm.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Security System Manual Override
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(extreme bottom position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is system.
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitNOTE:
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the signal lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature
can be turned on or turned off. To change the current
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

To Unlock The Doors

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Headlight Illumination On Approach

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

To Unlatch The Trunk

Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights, park lights and turn signals will flash, the Programming Additional Transmitters
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
turn on.
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
(24 km/h) or greater
Using The Panic Alarm

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
other hand.
the seal during removal.

Emergency Key Removal

Separating The RKE Transmitter Case

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
halves together.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Trunk closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE panic button not pushed

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Push and release the REMOTE START button
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
NOTE:
disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

To Enter Remote Start Mode

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
Remote Start mode.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then,
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button.
in the Remote Start mode.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in DOOR LOCKS
the EVIC until you push the START button.
Manual Door Locks
Cancel Remote Start
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
occur:
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed

Door Lock Knob

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Power Door Locks

If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Power Door Lock Switch

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

3. The driver door is opened.

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.

4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with in accordance with local laws.
power door locks if:
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
abled.
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
placed in PARK.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
door is unlocked.
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock To Enter The Trunk
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
located on the deck lid.
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.

CHMSL Button

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS

Power Window Switches

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature

To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
The driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the window
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- to stop.
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Reset Auto-Up

• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
switch again to close the window.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
after the window is fully open.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
Window Lockout Switch
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
press and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position).
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

Window Lockout Switch

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will
button will operate.
display until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
The trunk lid can be released from
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
outside the vehicle by pressing the
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds.

Trunk Release
Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either
by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the
inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young
children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the

Trunk Emergency Internal Release

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
Some of the most important safety features in your
energy during an impact event
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
all passengers
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat
wheel
belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
and child restraint systems. For more information on
LATCH, refer to Child Restraints under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride their arm.
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an (refer to Child Restraints under “Things To Know Before
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Starting Your Vehicle” for further information)
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.

WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belts

WARNING! (Continued)

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
(Continued)

injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.

Removing Slack From Belt

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.

In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.

First Row
Second
Row

Driver
N/A
ALR

Center
N/A
ALR

Passenger
ALR
ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest.
(BeltAlert®)
Energy Management Feature

Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).
It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belt Extender

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Air Bag Warning Light
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Steering Wheel and Column
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Instrument Panel
NOTE:

• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, •
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
•
authorized dealer immediately.
•

Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.

The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on
the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based
on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC
deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags,
SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection
by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
This especially applies to children.
it is inflated.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
removed.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors

• Unlock the doors automatically.

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System

If A Deployment Occurs

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is cycled off.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer improcess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Bag Warning Light

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.

You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
the rear seats rather than in the front.
it in the vehicle where you will use it.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and
Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large
for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown

air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not
move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it
can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?

N/A

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Yes

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Center position only may be removed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorages

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autodo not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position.
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.

WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the
Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?

Yes
Yes

Yes

Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Center position only may be removed.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Anchorage
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Look behind the seating position where you
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
plan to install the child restraint to find the
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
attach a tether anchor.
seat forward to provide better access to the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt that seating position, move the child restraint to another
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) position in the vehicle if one is available.
in any direction.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
behind the seat where you are placing the child
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.

Adjustable Headrest Downward Position

Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
be detrimental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operaENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
tions will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
vehicle.
Transporting Pets

Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts

not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Defroster
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
system.
the air directed against the windshield. See your authoFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

Door Latches

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .118

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .114

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .118

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .116

▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .176

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .209

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .215
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .219
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .221

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .226 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .230
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .233
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .234
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .235
. .237
. .239
. .241
. .242
. .242
. .243
. .243
. .243
. .244
. .245

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .247

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .248

▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .267

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . .270

▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . .
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .255
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . .
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .260
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .261
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .263
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . .

. . . .273
. . . .274
. . . .274
. . . .274
. . . .277
. . . .277
. . . .278
. . . .279
. . . .279

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .284
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .286
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .287
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .291
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .295
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .299

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
forward, full rearward and normal.
the doors.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Equipped
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirapproach lighting contain one LED, which is located in rors in Reverse position.
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.

Power Mirror Control

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the
sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel
to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards
until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the
extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is
located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.

Slide-On-Rod Feature

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
BSM Warning Light
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
vehicle is stationary.
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
vehicles in these areas.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
NOTE:
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deThe BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
tection zones.
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
alert during these types of zone entries.
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Entering From The Side

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.

Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.

Opposing Traffic

Stationary Objects

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.

Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
WARNING!
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approvolume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
the RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
be reduced.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Uconnect® 4.3
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, inCommission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alStandards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
phone.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:

2. The device must accept any interference received, Voice Activated Features:
including interference that may cause undesired op• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Moeration of the device.
bile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
Calls”)
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John For Uconnect® customer support:
Smith Mobile”)
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
Screen Activated Features:
1-877-855-8400.
• Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen,

• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis(French).
played on the touchscreen,
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
phone manufacturer for details.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
touchscreen,
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
to connect to them quickly.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect® Phone Button

Button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phoneThe Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without Uconnect® Voice Command Button
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
only used for “barge in” and when you are
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
make another call.
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
prompt.
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Operation
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methsay each part of the command when you are asked for it.
ods for how Voice Command works:
For example, you can use the compound command form
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile.”
voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can break
the compound command form into two voice commands:
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
“Search Contact” and when asked “John Smith.” Please
guide you to complete the task.
remember, the Uconnect® Phone works best when you
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
guided through the available options.
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button on your steering
the “Voice Command”
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in wheel.
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
Voice Command Tree
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
“I would like to.”
Help Command
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- the beep.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
button on your steering wheel and say a comdo you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was the
mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
button on the radio control head.
with a push of the
Natural Speech

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Cancel Command

NOTE:

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
you will be returned to the main menu.
complete this procedure.
or
button on your steering • The vehicle must be in PARK.
You can also push the
wheel when the system is listening for a command and
1. You can do either of the following:
be returned to the main or previous menu.
a. Press the SETTINGS hard-key, page down to the
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
see the Paired Phones screen. If there are no paired
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
phones you will see as the first device name.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the “Phone”
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
appear. If you select Yes you will go the Paired
Phones screen, if you select No you will return to
the Uconnect® Phone main menu.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device” 5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, 6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the PLAYER hard-key to begin.
2. Touch the “Source” soft-key.

NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.

3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.

You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.

4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.

• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device

Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device

1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
range. If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio 3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
Device follow these steps:
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Device” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.

5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.

3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device.
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
Device” soft-key.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.

Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.

• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS” section.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favorphone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
example, after you start the vehicle.
the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.

5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book

• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile 3. Once Emergency is touched, the “Edit” soft-key appears. Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given
phone is accessible.
the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be 4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transPhone Call Features
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
The following features can be accessed through the
phone connection.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
Emergency And Towing Assistance
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
listing to alter, Emergency for example.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ways To Initiate A Phone Call

Dial By Saying A Number

Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 1. Press the
button to begin.
with Uconnect® Phone.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Redial
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
• Dial by touching in the number

3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212.

• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
1. Push the “Phone”
button on your steering wheel to
• Mobile Phonebook
begin.
• Recent Call Log

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”

NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with one call or less active.
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Call Controls

Touch-Tone Number Entry

The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 1.
features:
2.
• Answer
3.
• End
4.
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold

Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”

• Transfer the call to/from the phone

To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
the
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook.

• Swap two active calls

Recent Calls

• Join two active calls together

You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:

• Mute/unmute

• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Missed Calls
• All Calls

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button and say “Show my mobile phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
button
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
will be displayed.
to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, call.
“Recent” or “Missed.”
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently In Progress
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
button on the
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
steering wheel to accept the call.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.

switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Also you can press the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone
main screen.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button. Only the active call(s) will be
soft-key or the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
Toggling Between Calls
far end, a call on hold may not become active automatiIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Redial

Uconnect® Phone Features

1. Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
button Emergency Assistance
and after the “Listening” prompt and the following If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
beep, say “Redial.”
reachable:
2. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
was dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
button to begin,
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will inends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
and Mexico.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

NOTE:

Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country If you need roadside/towing assistance:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • Press the
button to begin,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assisarea.
tance.”
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
for the mobile phone directly.
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outWARNING!
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
network coverage and stays connected to the
Voice Mail Calling
Uconnect® Phone.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonesystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then
or automated customer service line. Some services reif you press the
button and say “Send Voicemail
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
corresponding phone number associated with the phoneWhen calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that book entry, as tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button and say the word • The first number encountered for that contact will be
touchscreen or press the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
ignored.
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
Working With Automated Systems

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 1. Press the MORE hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
soft-key.
These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
a numbered sequence.
Voice Response Length.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
indicate your selection.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you Phone And Network Status Indicators
button and say, “John Smith” to Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
could push the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of of your phone and network status when you are attemptthe voice prompt.
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Phone main screen.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:

• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
• Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish accombinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
Bluetooth® Communication Link

• Dry Weather Conditions

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.

• Operation From The Driver’s Seat

Power-Up

• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
not the Uconnect® Phone

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Tree

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

• If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth® than these com• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mands will return a response that the contact does not
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
exist in the phonebook.
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
John Smith.
NOTE:

• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or General Information
“Other.”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect® • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
eration.
on the screen.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav

• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).

Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alRecent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:

Screen Activated Features

• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen.
Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith’s Mobile”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
SMS messages.

• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).

• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
touchscreen.
microphone for private conversation.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
WARNING!
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
For Uconnect® customer support:

Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.

The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
1-877-855-8400.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com different electronic devices to connect to each other without
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
(French).

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, Uconnect® Voice Command Button
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
The Uconnect® Voice Command
Button is
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
only used for “barge in” and when you are
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
make another call.
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
button is also used to access the Voice Comthe system at a time. The system is available in English, The
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
Spanish, or French languages.
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® Voice
Uconnect® Phone Button
Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
Button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the verecent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
book etc., When you press the button you will can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith momenu structure. Voice commands are required after most
bile.”
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mogiven. You can also break the commands into parts and
bile.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task.
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
guided through the available options.
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
prompt.
meters away from you.
Operation

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
you will be returned to the main menu.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
or
button on your steering
You can also push the
wheel when the system is listening for a command and 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
be returned to the main or previous menu.
Cancel Command

Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.

Mobile Phone Pairing

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.

Mobile Phone Pairing Progress

4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
while the system is connecting.
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
screen.
priority.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
Pair Additional Mobile Phones

3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • “Show Paired Phones”
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
• “Connect My Phone”
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
while the system is connecting.
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
Audio Devices screen.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear.
a list of paired audio devices:
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Show Paired Phones”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
• “Connect My Phone”
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
Audio Device After Pairing
while the system is connecting.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make follow these steps:
this device the highest priority. This device will take
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the 2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
button on the touchscreen.
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher 3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
priority.
Audio Device.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.

2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paires Audio Devices”
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite

5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touch- 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
screen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen; you • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
to the Uconnect® Phone.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downPhonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
able for use.
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transfollow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
QUICK TIPS” section.
phone connection.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phonebook from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”

Phonebook Favorites

NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up To Remove A Favorite
appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will then be
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
asked which contact and number to choose from your
Phone main screen.
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
will be shown.
then touch the + Options soft-key.
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.

Add From Mobile

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.

Remove From Favorites

2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites.

4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
Favs.”
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call

Emergency And Towing Assistance Favorites

Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.

5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose • Redial
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Dial by pressing in the number
to default.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

• Mobile Phonebook

3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.

• Recent Call Log
• SMS Message Viewer

Call Controls

Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the “Phone”
begin.

The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
button on your steering wheel to features:
• Answer

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• End
say “Dial 151-1234-5555.”
• Ignore
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number
• Hold/unhold
151-1234-5555.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the “Phone”
begin.

• Mute/unmute

button on your steering wheel to • Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Join two active calls together
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Touch-Tone Number Entry

Recent Calls

1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.

You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:

2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
button on your steering wheel while in a
the “VR”
call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your
mobile phonebook.

Recent Calls

• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

• Missed Calls
• All Calls

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls” Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssoft-key on the Phone main screen.
button on the steering wheel
tem. Push the “Phone”
button and say “Show my to accept the call. You can also press the “answer” button
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
will be displayed.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
button and say “Show my Currently In Progress
You can also press the
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will If a call is currently in progress and you have another
be displayed.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button on the steermobile phone. Push the “Phone”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
ing wheel, or press the “answer” button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Toggling Between Calls

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress

button to toggle
You can also press the “Phone”
between the active and held phone call.

You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.

Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
button or the “end” button on the touchscreen. Only
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
the
active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call
Phone main screen.
on hold, it will become the new active call.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

Redial

Uconnect® Phone Features

Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or press the Emergency Assistance
and after the “Listening” prompt and
“Phone” button
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
the following beep, say “Redial.”
reachable:
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
button to begin.
1. Press the
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
vehicle.
and Mexico.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance

• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the If you need roadside/towing assistance:
touchscreen.
button to begin.
1. Push the
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
“Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area. NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that (1-800- 521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
for the mobile phone directly.
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
WARNING!
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
Voice Mail Calling
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Uconnect® Phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonesystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
or automated customer service line. Some services rePassword”, then if you push the
button and say
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
then send the corresponding phone number associated
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button and say the word • The first number encountered for that contact will be
touchscreen or push the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
ignored.
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can push the
6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
Working With Automated Systems

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 1. Press the “More” button on the touchscreen (where
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
available), then press the “Settings” button on the
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
touchscreen.
a numbered sequence.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
indicate your selection.
numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you
button and say, “John Smith” to Phone And Network Status Indicators
could push the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
the voice prompt.
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
able to hear the conversation coming from the other If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply press the “Mute” phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would Even though the system is designed for many languages
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from and accents, the system may not always work for some.
you.
When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
a voice command period.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
Performance is maximized under:
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition

Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.

Voice Text List

NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text Reply

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”

Preset Message List

4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
sent.
you wish to send the message to.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Press the

button.

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”

3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List

After the system confirms that you want to send your
List of Preset Messages:
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. I can’t talk right now.

12. Stuck in traffic.

5. Call me.

13. Start without me.

6. I’ll call you later.

14. Where are you?

7. I’m on my way.

15. Are you there yet?

8. Thanks.

16. I need directions.

9. I’ll be late.

17. I’m lost.

10. I will be minutes late.

18. See you later.

11. See you in minutes.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Tree

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
which phone number you want to send a message to
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
NOTE:

3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”

call log download over Bluetooth® then these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.

4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
number supported by your Mobile phone.
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
while the VR session is active.
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

NOTE:

5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.

1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
SiriusXM Travel Link.

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.

Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command
but- can say a command. This will become helpful once you
ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give start to learn the options.
a command.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two “Help.”
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

These commands are universal and can be used from any Natural Speech
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
the active application.
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
a normal speaking volume.
would like to.”
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
set to low.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
button and say “Help.” You will hear requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Command
available commands for the screen displayed.

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Changing The Volume
requires more information from the user it will ask a
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button.
button.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Uconnect® Voice Commands
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Comtwo types of commands. Universal commands are availmand system is speaking. Please note the volume
able at all times. Local commands are available if the
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
supported radio mode is active.
system.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Combutton.
mand

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
button.
Command
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Tree

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
loaded/connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Recently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” “Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” “Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto
Dealers.”

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
Power Seats — If Equipped
SEATS

On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
vehicle.
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward or rearward.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Reclining The Seatback

WARNING! (Continued)

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.

Power Lumbar Switch

Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect® 8.4/
using the Uconnect® System.
8.4 Nav

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect® display.

Controls Soft-Key

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start

Heated Seats Soft-Keys

On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
one, indicating the change. Operation on the LO-level
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
45 minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
within two to five minutes.
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
LO and none for OFF.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating. ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
Press the switch a second time to select LO- small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine
level heating. Press the switch a third time to perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats

If the HI-level heating is selected, the system will auto- The ventilated seats can be operated using the
matically switch to LO-level heating after approximately Uconnect® System.
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
Uconnect® display.
Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect®
8.4/8.4 Nav:

Controls Soft-Key

Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

WARNING! (Continued)

On models that are equipped with remote start, the the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head Restraints

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while
(Continued)

The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints

Push Button

The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.

Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.

Adjustment Button

NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.

Rear Seatback Loop

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.

The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.

Memory Seat Switches

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming The Memory Feature

NOTE:

NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
existing profile from memory.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System,
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferrefer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
Instrument Panel” for further information.
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
Transmitter To Memory
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
switch.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which
memory position has been set.
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressmation.
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following: transmitter in Step 4.
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the Memory Position Recall
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
Enter-N-Go™).
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for equipped).
the system to complete the memory recall before
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, press
continuing to Step 3.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press memory position 1.
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
position 1.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, press MEMORY vehicle.
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2. have the driver’s seat positioned when you cycle the veNOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the hicles ignition to the OFF position.
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry • When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
position 2.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and
position.
telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can • When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
be selected.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will move to a TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
driver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm
and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
return to its previously set position when you place the
of the instrument panel.
ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the
driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

Hood Release Lever

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)

detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on NOTE:
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruNOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
ment Panel” for further information.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Feaof vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
further information.
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Equipped
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat- to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera dealer.
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

Headlight Time Delay

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time
up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unless
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to the
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turn
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins Off when the ignition is switched OFF.
when the headlight switch is turned off.

NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruIf you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch ment Panel” for further information.
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
Lights-On Reminder
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
turn off in the normal manner.
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using when the driver’s door is opened.
the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight
switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
switch.
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Lights — If Equipped

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever

Fog Light Switch

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signals

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

High/Low Beam Switch

Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Front Map/Reading Lights

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.

Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.

Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ambient Light — If Equipped

Interior Lights

The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.

Ambient Light

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
equipped).
Dimmer Controls

Dimmer Controls

Instrument Panel Dimmer

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Position

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.

The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.

CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Washers

WARNING! (Continued)

To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for Mist Feature
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
the intermittent interval previously selected.
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
and then turn off.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windmoved out of the NEUTRAL position.
shield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inmay reduce Rain Sensing performance.
formation.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
following conditions:
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed located below the steering wheel at the end of the
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- steering column.
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
NOTE:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
lever on the steering column.
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.

WARNING!

Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.

Controls Soft-Key

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
Adjustable Pedals Switch
from the driver to provide improved position with the
Press
the
switch
forward to move the pedals forward
steering wheel.
(toward the front of the vehicle).
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward • For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
(toward the driver).
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “UnderREVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sysstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
information.
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
CAUTION!
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limNOTE:
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full adjustable pedal’s path.
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +

3 — SET 4 — CANCEL

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Activate

To Set A Desired Speed

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

To Deactivate

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
the vehicle ahead.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.

NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — RES +
3 — SET -

4 — CANCEL
5 — ON/OFF
6 — MODE

When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following To Activate
conditions:
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.

• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.

ACC Set

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.

Driver Override

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- To Turn Off
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, memory if:
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

To Resume Speed

To Vary The Speed Setting

Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your To Increase Speed
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
last set speed.
pressing the RES + button.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
20 mph (32 km/h).
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.

U.S. Speed (mph)
• RES + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
• RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reset speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in
flected in the EVIC display.
an increase of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC display.
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
pressing the SET - button.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
NOTE:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.

Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.

Distance Set 3 (long)

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Distance Set 2 (medium)

Distance Set 1 (short)

To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
(short).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.

NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
ACC system applies the brakes.
speed.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
the sensor.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph “BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
(25 km/h) and the system automatically disengages while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
itself.

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.

Brake Alert 2

Brake Alert 3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.

Brake Alert 1

When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The • When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
Cruise Control Ready.”
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
ACC SET
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
• When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
• The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
while ACC is set.
display the following information:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off

The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
• Set Speed Change
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

• System Off

The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
• ACC Proximity Warning
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
• ACC Unavailable Warning
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
warning may temporarily occur.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
system may also become temporarily blinded due to examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of vehicle behind the lower grille.
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
operation.
require a sensor realignment.
ACC Unavailable Warning
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
malfunction.
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning

The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.

Turn Or Bend Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.

Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Narrow Vehicle Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.

WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.

To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the RES + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Cancel

To Turn Off

The system will disable normal Cruise Control without The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
erasing the memory if:
memory if:
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.

• You push and release the ON/OFF button.

• You press the CANCEL button.

• You turn off the ignition.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • You switch off ESC.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
To Resume
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from Normal Cruise Control).
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
speed.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react and avoid the potential collision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
WARNING! (Continued)
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end every type of potential collision. The driver has the
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
collision is probable a warning message (both audible vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
Changing FCW Status
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
deactivated.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® SetNOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
10 mph (16 km/h).
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
be displayed in the Uconnect® display.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
(Continued)

The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overthe system to warn you of a possible collision with the
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncomsetting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
rate of speed.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system • If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
display on the EVIC screen.
in front of you.
FCW Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Uconnect® display.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable.
driver after ignition shut down.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

If this occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized EQUIPPED
dealer.
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.

ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense® Sensors

ParkSense® Display

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within will turn ON indicating the system status.
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in (150 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Park Assist Ready

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

Park Assist System Off

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

Slow Tone

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs

Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
None

WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast

Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous

2 Slow
Flashing

1 Slow
Flashing

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”

ParkSense® will turn off the Rear Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaChime volume settings can be selected from the
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
Uconnect® System.
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, ⬙SERVICE PARK
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ASSIST⬙ or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” mesParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
through ignition cycles.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
ASSIST SYSTEM” message for five seconds. Refer to
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damposition and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
age the sensors.
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
NOTE:
sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper- • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ating properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instrua false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
bumper.
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
30 cm from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued)

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Push the “More” soft-key.

3. Push the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Push the check box soft-key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.

Overhead Console

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped

Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

Courtesy Lights

Sunglasses Bin Door

The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.

Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
follow these steps:
light in view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the Homelink®
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, push and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.

use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

(Continued)

Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

Venting Sunroof — Express

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.

Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunshade Operation

Sunroof Maintenance

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
Wind Buffeting
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
door will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain NOTE:
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxithe rear windows open, then open the front and rear
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
cancel this feature.
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob
and element must be used.

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.

300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.

Front Power Outlet

WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.

Center Console Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301

There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest

Rear Center Console Power Outlet

302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.

CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.

Retractable Cover

304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Cupholders

Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches

Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305

WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.

convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.

Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide

Rear Seat Cupholders

306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped

STORAGE

On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with Glove Compartment
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
of the instrument panel.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Glove Compartment
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307

Opened Glove Compartment

Center Console

Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
lever.
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
Two separate storage compartments are also located small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
underneath the center console armrest.
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
Console Features

308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power Door Storage
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
The door panels contain storage areas.

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.

Front Door Trim Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309

Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.

310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .315

▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . . .335

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .317

▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327

▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .343
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . .
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .379
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

. .382
. .383
. .383
. .383
. .384
. .390
. .392
. .393

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Uconnect® System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
— Glove Compartment

7 — ESC Off Switch
8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
9 — SD Memory Card Slot
10 — Power Outlet
11 — CD/DVD Slot
12 — Storage Compartment

13
14
15
16
17
18

—
—
—
—
—
—

Engine Start/Stop Button
Trunk Release Button
Dimmer Controls
Hood Release
Headlight Switch
Paddle Shifters

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped

4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator

This indicator shows that the high beam headThis indicator will illuminate when the park
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forlights or headlights are turned on.
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

3. Turn Signal Indicators

6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn Center (EVIC) Display
signal when the turn signal lever is operated. Odometer Display
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle The odometer display shows the total distance the veis driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal hicle has been driven.
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
for a defective outside light bulb.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair NOTE:
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
PARK.
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operatmust be reset at zero.
ing” for further information.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
should be checked monthly when cold and
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto- placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
matic transmission.
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
10. Fuel Door Reminder

11. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.

The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the 13. Sport Shifting
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
This light will illuminate when Track mode is
vehicle.
selected. When Track Mode is selected, the
EVIC will display “Track Mode Activated (Suspension and Transmission)”. In addition to

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects transmission
shifting in either Auto or Manual mode. Refer to
“AutoStick” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. The transmission has a sportier, more aggressive shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission
will hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
shifter or paddle switches).
14. Sport Suspension
The light will illuminate when Sport or Track
mode is selected. When Sport mode is selected,
the EVIC will display “Sport Mode Active
(Suspension)”. This mode provides performance based tuning with improved handling through an
electronic controlled damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations
including cornering, acceleration and braking. When
Track Mode is Selected, the EVIC will display “Track

Mode Activated (Suspension and Transmission)”. In addition to SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects
transmission shifting. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
Light — If Equipped
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conbooster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
trol (ESC) is off.
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.

18. Brake Warning Light

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ NOTE:
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
to ON/RUN.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction InESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
previously.
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
21. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“260” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “260” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info
• SRT
• Turn Menu OFF
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering UP Arrow Button
wheel:
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle BACK Button
Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
DOWN Arrow Button
previous menu or sub-menu.
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
RIGHT Arrow Button

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
1. The top line where compass direction and outside
temperature are displayed.

2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button for
messages are displayed.
access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a
personal setting in the setup menu. Press and 3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
The main display area will normally display the main
to reset features.
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
into several categories:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
• Five Second Stored Message
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
message takes control of the main display area for five is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of ⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
• Five Second Unstored Messages
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message takes control of the main display area for five
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unand ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
• Unstored Messages
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
middle, and red telltales on the left.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status

• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And OperCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
ating”
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This light warns the driver of a potential colli- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
driver to take action in order to avoid the
operating and needs service. For further inforcollision. For further information, refer to
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Your Vehicle.”
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
telltales include:
• Charging System Light
• Door Ajar
EVIC Red Telltale Lights

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
• Trunk Ajar
turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the
charging system light remains on, it means that the
may be ajar.
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho• Oil Pressure Warning Light
rized dealer.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.

• If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
and your vehicle may require towing.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.

4
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on
vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point
has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.

GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator

The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator
When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the to a situation where changing gear is not required to
display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower improve fuel consumption.
gear.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC:

• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the • Distance To Empty (DTE)
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
Trip Computer functions.
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Average Fuel Economy/ECO Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
reset.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW EVIC.
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Trip Info
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km
Trip A
(L/100km)
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km (L/
reset.
100km) feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a
bar graph below the DTE, this function cannot be reset. Trip B
Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Vehicle Speed

reset.

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.

Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed time
will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
for two seconds. The current display will reset along with
other functions.
Units

SRT

WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the performance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark The Performance Features include the following:
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
been selected.
• Braking Distance

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will appear
when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The screen will revert back to “Please come to a
complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehicle fails to reach
60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.

To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “SRT” appears in the EVIC, then press • The time will continue to display until the SELECT
and release the SELECT button. Press the UP or DOWN
button is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop.
button to cycle through the features. Press the SELECT
Braking Distance
button to select a feature. Press and hold the SELECT
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
button to reset best time.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
The following describes each feature and its operation:
depressed.
Timers
• This feature will only function when applying the
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for • Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The word “READY” will display when conditions are • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
met for the event to begin.
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will display when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
• 0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com- • The time will continue to display until the vehicle is
plete stop.
brought to a stop.
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to Instantaneous G-Force
display until the conditions are met for another event When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
to be recorded.
(lateral and longitudinal).
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run Peak G-Force
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the • When a force greater than zero is measured, the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 25 seconds.
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

• Pressing and holding the SELECT button for five • Oil Temperature
seconds will clear the peak force values.
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Oil Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the • Trans Temperature
available information displays, then press SELECT to
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
display any one of the following choices.
• Engine Hours
• Coolant Temp
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Tire Pressure
• AWD Status — If Equipped
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted
THE SPARE TIRE).
and ⬙AWD⬙ if All Wheel Drive is active. Displays a
vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and ⬙RWD⬙ if
All Wheel Drive is inactive.

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Messages #

Hard-Keys

Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main
Menu.

Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Turn Menu OFF

Soft-Keys
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pushing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pushing Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® touchscreen.
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
4.3 Settings
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.

NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft-key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.

1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the “Mode” soft-key to change this display. When
in this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key, then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Language
Touch the “Language” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
Display
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Brightness
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) softTouch the “Brightness” soft-key to change this display. key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
When in this display, you may select display brightness arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the will display in the selected language.
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

• Units

is pressed. To change the Touchscreen Beep setting press
and release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key, then touch the
Touch the “Units” soft-key to change this display. When
arrow back soft-key.
in this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric • Fuel Saver Display
units of measure. Touch “US” or “Metric” then touch the Touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key to turn the ECO
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or
will display in the selected units of measure.
off. To make your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Dis• Voice Response

play” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.

Touch the “Voice Response” soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Clock
Length, press and release the “Brief” or “Long” soft-key. • Set Time
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Set Time” soft-key to change this display.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select the time display
Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key to turn on or shut settings. To make your selection, touch the “Set Time”
off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) soft-key, adjust the hours and minutes using the up and

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

down soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Safety/Assistance
Then touch the back arrow soft-key when all selections • Front Collision Warning — If Equipped
are complete.
Touch the “Front Collision Warning” soft-key to change
• Show Time Status
this display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature
Touch the “Show Time Status” soft-key to change this can be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show system will warn you of a possible collision with the
Time Status setting, press and release the “ON” or “OFF” vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This
• Sync Time — If Equipped
warns you of a possible collision when you are much
Touch the “Sync Time” soft-key to change this display. closer to the vehicle in front of you. This allows for a
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time more dynamic driving experience. To change the FCW
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and status, press and release the “OFF,” “Near” or “Far”
release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key. Then touch the back button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
arrow soft-key.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

• ParkSense® — If Equipped

Volume” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuraand the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
tion state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the Touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key to change
ParkSense® status, touch and release the “Sound Only” this display. When this feature is selected, the outside
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the arrow rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is
back soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
operating information.
their previous position when the transmission is shifted
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped

out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the “Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. Touch the “Blind Spot Alert” soft-key to change this
To make your selection, touch the “ParkSense® Chime display. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode
is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the “OFF,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
Touch the “Rain Sensing” soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
“Rain Sensing” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Touch the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

Lights
• Illuminated Approach
Touch the “Illuminated Approach” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or “90” soft-key.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.

feature. To make your selection, touch the “Headlights
With Wipers” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”

Touch the “Auto High Beams” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain
conditions. To make your selection, touch the “Auto High
Beams” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
the back arrow soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™
• Headlights With Wipers
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-key to change Vehicle” for further information.
this display. When this feature is selected, and the
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers Touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key to change
are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

your selection, touch the “Daytime Running Lights” Headlights With Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or
soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
arrow soft-key.
Doors & Locks
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
Touch the “Steering Directed Lights” soft-key to change settings will be available.
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights • Auto Lock
turn relative to a change in direction of the steering
wheel. To make your selection, touch the “Steering When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autoDirected Lights” soft-key and select “ON” or ‘OFF.” Then matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto
touch the back arrow soft-key.
Unlock On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
• Flash Lights With Lock
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the “Flash Headlights With Lock” soft-key to Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous
change this display. When this feature is selected, the menu.
signal lights will flash when the doors are locked with the • Auto Unlock On Exit
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock Touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit” soft-key to change this
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto
Unlock On Exit” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock
Touch the “Flash Lights With Lock” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the front and
rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lights With
Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF”. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start

make your selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Sound Horn With Lock
Touch the “Sounds Horn With Lock” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will
chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key
and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Remote Door Unlock Order

Touch the “Remote Door Unlock Order” soft-key to
Touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key to change this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On
change this display. When this feature is selected, the 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

On 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected,
all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button.

• Memory Linked To FOB

Touch the “Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key to change
this display. This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N- settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the
Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to “Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key and select “ON” or
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no “OFF.” Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only • Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened, Touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key to change this display.
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
“Passive Entry” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless EnterN-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”

Engine Off Options
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped

Touch the “Easy Exit Seats” soft-key to change this
display. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
Heated Seats
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the
• Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
“Easy Exit Seats” soft-key, and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Driver
Touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key to change this
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C)
Vehicle” for further information.
the Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your
selection, touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key and • Headlight Off Delay
select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow softTouch the “Headlight Off Delay” soft-key to change this
key.
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or
“90” soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Engine Off Power Delay

the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass headTouch the “Engine Off Power Delay” soft-key to change
ing.
this display. When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lapsunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to module is located, and it can cause interference with the
OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
change the Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0
seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes”
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

also calibrate the compass by touching the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Audio
Compass Variance Map

• Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may

• Equalizer
Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press Sound” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
the back arrow soft-key.
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade

Phone/Bluetooth®

Touch the “Balance/Fade” soft-key to change this dis- • Paired Devices
play. When in this display, you may adjust the Balance This feature shows which phones are paired to the
and Fade settings.
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Touch the “Speed Adjusted Volume” soft-key to change
this display. This feature increases or decreases volume
relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the “OFF,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.

SIRIUS Setup
• Channel Skip

SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
Touch the “Surround Sound” soft-key to change this the channels you would like to skip. Then touch the back
display. This feature provides simulated surround sound arrow soft-key.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

• Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings

Press the “More” soft-key, then press the “Settings”
soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
scription Information screen.
Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To and SIRIUS Setup.
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
the screen or visit the provider online.
time.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.

When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Once the setting is complete press the “Back Arrow”
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.

“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.

• Display Mode

• Set Language

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
Display
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
will be available.
arrow soft-key.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.

When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the “Set Language” soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

• Units

pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
• Voice Response Length

designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may change the Voice ReCluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
to return to the previous menu.
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is

display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key,

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock

• Set Time Minutes

After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available.
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
When in this display, you may automatically have the soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that • Time Format
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow When in this display, you may select the time format
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
• Set Time Hours
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front
of you. This allows for a more dynamic driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch and release the
OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar”
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Conback arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Safety & Driving Assistance
Vehicle”.
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance soft-key
• ParkSense® — If Equipped
the following settings will be available.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be set to and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of FCW will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or
time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The position and the transmission shift lever is in the REFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
ating information.
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
• ParkSense® Chime Volume
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, touch the ParkSense® Chime When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configura- (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
tion state through ignition cycles.
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
to return to the previous menu.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor When this feature is selected, the system will automatialignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
in the BSM not operating to specification.
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.

• ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped

Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will and operating information. To make your selection, touch

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears • Headlight Illumination On Approach
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
menu.
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will be available.
previous menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apsetting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” softbutton on the touchscreen to return to the previous key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
soft-key to return to the previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the “Steering Directed Lights”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.

• Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lamps with
Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Doors & Locks

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
• Flash Lamps With Lock
settings will be available.
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Flash Lamps With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.” After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat return to the previous menu.
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
for further information.
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
Engine Off Options
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- arrow back soft-key.
lowing settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Easy Exit Seat
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back return to the previous menu.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings
• Engine Off Power Delay
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the followWhen this feature is selected, the power window ing settings will be available.
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the comCompass Variance Map
pass module is located, and it can cause interference with
• Perform Compass Calibration
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and it may need to
be calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

pressing the “ON” soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume

Audio

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
will be available.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and • Music Info Cleanup
Fade settings.
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
• Equalizer
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and pressing the back arrow soft-key.
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key.

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

• Channel Skip

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
the back arrow soft-key.

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the fol• Subscription Information
lowing settings will be available.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
• Paired Devices
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
This feature shows which phones are paired to the with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer services, it will be necessary to access the information on
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
settings will be available.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
SRT Performance Features

WARNING! (Continued)
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.

To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the “SRT
& More” soft-key then touch the “SRT Performance”
soft-key. Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle through
the features. Press the feature soft-key to select that The Performance Features include the following:
feature.
• Timers
• Engine Values

WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
(Continued)

• Digital Gauge Displays
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• 1/8 Mile (200 meter)

Timers

• 1/4 Mile (400 meter)

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter), 1/4 Mile
(400 meter)

• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h), 1/8
mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile (400 meter).
• The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is
at 0 mph (0 km/h).

When selected, this screen allows you to choose Sport • Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last
times recorded.
Track mode.
• This mode provides performance based suspension Braking Distance
tuning with improved handling and acceleration When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
through an electronic controlled dampening system.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
• This system reduces body roll and pitch in many depressed.
driving situations including cornering, acceleration • This feature will only function when applying the
and braking.
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake • Oil Pressure
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a comShows the actual oil pressure.
plete stop.
• Battery Voltage
G-Force
Shows the actual battery voltage.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as Gauges 2
steering angle.
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display • Coolant Temperature
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
the peak forces will continue to display.
the gauge.
Gauges 1
• Oil Temperature
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
• Oil Temperature
gauge.
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Transmission Temperature

Handling

Shows the actual transmission temperature within the When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering
and yaw angles.
range of the gauge.
• Intake Air Temperature

Options

Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range When selected, this screen allows you to choose a standard or customize display for your SRT home page.
of the gauge.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
Engine
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph), visit Apple’s website for software updates.
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplegear selector values.
ment Manual.
Shows the actual battery voltage.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED

dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround sound processing.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies delivering substantial increases in component and system efficiency levels.

Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Features” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.

The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture.
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source.
The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in

Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touchscreen.

Uconnect® 4.3 — Hard-Key

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Climate Controls — Hard-Keys (MTC System
Shown)

Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys

Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Soft-Keys)
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will as follows:
automatically exit Sync.
Hard-Key
9. SYNC
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.

clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
• Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. When
the defrost mode is selected, the blower level may
increase.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

12. Climate Control OFF Button

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Provides the driver with independent temperature contime.
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)

Climate Control Functions

Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
area indicates cooler temperatures.

A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

NOTE:

MAX A/C

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforFloor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but mance.
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
of the windows.
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, is ON.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Recirculation Control

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passelected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8,
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
comfort level.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiimprove window clearing operation. Recirculation will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Atsystem to function automatically.
tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will
cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn
off.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
comfort as quickly as possible.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
selected in Manual operation.
this section of the manual.
Operating Tips
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will suggested control settings for various weather condiincrease in speed and transition into Auto mode.
tions.
NOTE:

Manual Operation Override

Summer Operation

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, The engine cooling system must be protected with a
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrotrol.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Winter Operation
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winUse of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
is not recommended because it may cause window
but rainy or humid weather.
fogging.
NOTE:
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatifresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .408

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .408

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 䡵 LAUNCH MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .405 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .406

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .434

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED . .427
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .432
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .453

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .467
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .456

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .476

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .464

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .466

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484

▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .482

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .484
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .484

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.

position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
NEUTRAL Position)
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector To change the ignition switch positions without starting
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)

3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proceThe engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and grounded, three-wire extension cord.
hold it.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
WARNING!
Module.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
WARNING!
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.

• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing

The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:

•
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
•
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick®⬙ in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or tapping
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (-/+) (if
equipped), will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
OFF position first.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVE (D)

SPORT (S) — If Equipped

This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch
panel).

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the “AutoStick®” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Transmission Limp Home Mode

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomto be driven to an authorized dealer for service without mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
damaging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
dealer service is required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
5. Restart the engine.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

AUTOSTICK®
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, and many other situations.
1 — (–) Shift Paddle

2 — (+) Shift Paddle

Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel- • If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
when maximum engine speed is reached. The transenter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
mission will upshift only when commanded by the
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
(EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster. In AutoStick®
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-)
display the current gear.
is manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever,
or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
vehicle is accelerated.
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+), (at a stop) will allow starting in second
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached.
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are three modes of operation:

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

• Sport Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in SPORT mode (press the CONTROLS button and then the SPORT button on the
display screen). The SPORT soft key can also be found
on the SRT Performance Page (press the SRT & MORE
button and the SRT Performance Page button then the
SPORT button on the display screen). This mode will
set suspension for maximum performance handling
and is intended for spirited driving.
NOTE: The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride.
• When SPORT mode is enabled, a shock symbol will
light up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
• Automatic (Auto) Mode — This is the default position
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instruwhen the vehicles ignition is first turned on. This
ment Panel” for further information.
mode will give a sporty, but comfortable ride. Within
• AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride,
this mode, the suspension will adapt to the vehicle
where as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer, sportier
inputs, including vehicle speed, steering inputs, braksuspension with better handling.
ing and acceleration.
SPORT/TRACK Mode

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Track Mode — This mode includes SPORT suspension
and affects transmission shifting in either “Auto” or
“Manual” mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. In TRACK
mode, the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive
shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will
hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
shifter or paddle shifters).

during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.

Preconditions:
• When TRACK mode is enabled, a flag symbol will
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
light up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instruarea.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
LAUNCH MODE — IF EQUIPPED
of vehicle life.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system • Launch Control should only be used when the engine
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
and transmission are at operating temperature.
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved 6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at approximately 1825 RPM for the quickest
may cause damage to vehicle components.
launch.
Launch Control is only available when the following
• Messages will appear in the cluster EVIC display to
procedure is followed:
inform the driver if one or more of the above
1. Press the “ESC OFF” button to put the vehicle into
conditions (3 through 6) have not been met.
ESC Partial mode. The “ESC OFF” lamp will illumi7. When conditions 3 through 6 have been met, the
nate in the cluster.
cluster EVIC display will read “Launch Ready Release
2. Press the “ESC OFF” button a second time to put the
Brake”.
vehicle into Launch Control. The “ESC OFF” lamp will
Release the brake and continue to hold wide open
remain lit, and the cluster display will read “Launch
throttle to launch.
Control Enabled”.
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
3. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
4. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
62 mph (100 kph), at which point the ESC system
5. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in continues in ESC Full ON mode. Activating Launch
“Drive”.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

Control again from this state will require pressing the • Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles
“ESC OFF” button twice. Repeat steps 3 through 8.
of engine break-in.
Launch control will abort before launch completion and DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
Acceleration
following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
system continues in ESC Full ON.
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer when there is a difference in the surface traction under
moving in a straight line. ESC system continues in ESC the rear (driving) wheels.
Full ON.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode. One press puts the ESC system into
ESC Full-On.
NOTE:
• After launch control has been aborted, the vehicle will
resort back to ESC Full ON.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Traction

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
(Continued)

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

Shallow Standing Water

(Continued)
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

Power Steering Fluid Check

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
there is a problem with the power steering system.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. rized dealer.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
CAUTION!
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
CAUTION!
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
Parking Brake
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.

(Continued)

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inThe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
vehicle stability and brake performance under most debris, or panic stops.
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
You also may experience the following when the brake
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
system goes into Anti-Lock:
wheel lock-up.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
short time after the stop).
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
axle.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.

WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you

must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
The ESC system has three available operating modes:
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
ESC On
switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off.
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
Partial Off
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momenintended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the while the vehicle is in motion.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
ESC Operating Modes

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle odometer. Press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message. The “ESC OFF”
message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use into the PARK position from any position other than
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned will occur when the message was previously cleared.
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
Full Off

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction

when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
activate:
HSA Activation Criteria

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

Towing With HSA

HSA Off

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
when pulling a trailer.
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderWARNING!
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Ready Alert Braking
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rain Brake Support

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loSupport is active, there is no notification to the driver and cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
no driver interaction is required.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

NOTE:

Synchronizing ESC

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.

If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information
Placard

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

Tire And Loading Information Placard

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
the weight referenced here.
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occubeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
capacity calculated in step 4.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy

stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tire Inflation Pressures

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

Radial Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local authorized dealership or tire
dealer for these size tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about ½
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
(Continued)

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tire Rotation

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
different loads and perform different steering, driving, with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at the following diagram.
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• TPM Telltale Light
Premium System
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
readings to the receiver module.
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
illuminate or the chime to sound.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors

The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
displayed.
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display

Service TPMS Warning

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.

If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
materials that may block radio wave signals.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.

The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
message is then followed with a graphic display with
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presOFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
limit in any of the four active road tires.
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnminimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
in place of the pressure value.
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in
displayed.
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
General Information
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

• This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
including interference that may cause undesired op- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
eration.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiing licenses:
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the WorldFUEL REQUIREMENTS
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
6.4L Engine
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speciThe 6.4L engine is designed to meet all fications if they are available.
emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using Reformulated Gasoline
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Canada

2546A-C4W4MA4

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.

CAUTION! (Continued)
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
may be used in your vehicle.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
(Continued)

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Operate in a lean mode.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• Poor engine performance.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
E-85 perform the following:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

Materials Added To Fuel

CAUTION! (Continued)

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).

Fuel Filler Door

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

2. Open the fuel filler door.

NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.

6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.

Fuel Funnel

CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release

Access Cover

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel 3. Pull the release cable.
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Release Cable

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
VEHICLE LOADING

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Overloading

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

NOTE:

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.

• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .488

▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .488 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .501
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .492
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .508

488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.

490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)

M14 x 1.50

Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491

TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

6
Torque Patterns

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TIREFIT Storage

TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation

The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.

TIREFIT Components
TIREFIT Location

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side
of TIREFIT Kit)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode

Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and TIREFIT Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the TIRE- • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
selecting this mode.
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.

494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only inuse. Always replace these components immediately at
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.

• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.

(Continued)

496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an
allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.

kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREFIT kit.

Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.

WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.

500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air If
Mode position.
1.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflastem.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
Volt outlet.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
ment”.
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
using the TIREFIT service kit.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpBottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
of it accordingly.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
ing.

502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
precautions.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.

Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
charged battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
in the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
with the discharged battery.
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
you should have the battery and charging system in- front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
spected at your authorized dealer.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.

506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507

WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold
the override release lever in.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Shift Lever Override
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
next to the shifter on the center console).
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.

508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift

Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front

Flatbed

Rear
ALL

ALL MODELS
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the Key Fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.

CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to the front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position, not in the OFF or ACC position.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
not in the OFF or ACC position.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground
(on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel
lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL).

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI) . .513

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .514

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .548
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .552
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side Marker
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps . . .559

▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn Lamp
— Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .564
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir

6
7
8
9

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir

514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
not crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

CAUTION! (Continued)

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change incheck the engine oil level is about five minutes after a tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519

Engine Oil Viscosity

Synthetic Engine Oils

Use Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomMOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomMS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Engine Oil Filter
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- at every engine oil change.
tion.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added To Engine Oil
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiservice. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
tives.
filter and are recommended.

520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jumpserious personal injury.
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521

WARNING!

Battery Location

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery
that the positive cable is attached to the positive post
and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-)
and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts and free of
corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter

The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.

524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.

Filter Access Cover

3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door

2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.

4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525

Body Lubrication

A/C Air Filter

5. Close the filter access cover.

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
from a dry windshield.
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- rating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering, The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).
sary.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only according to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for needed to be added to the system please contact your
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of local authorized dealer.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. Selection Of Coolant
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanlocal authorized dealer.
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporno need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
a month.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising.
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec- maintenance intervals.
tion of your engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)

536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reure.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)

538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant

recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.

CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this any special additives in the transmission.
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check

transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Fluid And Filter Changes
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
maintenance intervals.

540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid Change Axle Fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
mission is disassembled for any reason.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
Fluid Level Check
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underhole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. body protection.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541

The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Interior Care
required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545

CAUTION!

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- scratch the elements.
age than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folmolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft with the cupholder in the center console.
cloth.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547

FUSES

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.

Front Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549

Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
25 Amp Natural
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
25 Amp Natural

Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1
Power Steering #1
Starter
Anti-Lock Brakes
Anti-Lock Brakes
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Transmission

550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Cartridge Fuse
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
–
25 Amp Natural
–
–
25 Amp Natural

Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #2
Power Steering #2
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Transmission Shifter
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551

Cavity
35
36
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–

Description
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays
Airbag Module
Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare

552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.

Rear Power Distribution Center

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553

Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–

Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow

15
16
17

40 Amp Green
–
–

–
–
–

Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting/Washer Pump
Power Locks
Driver Door
Passenger Door
Cigar Lighters, Instrument Panel & Power Outlet Console Rear
HVAC Blower
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare

554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

32
33

–
–

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
–
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue

Description
Active Dampening Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Radio Screen
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fuse – Spare
Amplifier
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/Wireless Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555

Cavity
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–

44
45
46
47
48

–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow

Description
Steering Column Module/Clock
Battery Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel
Park Assist/Blind Spot/Camera
Cluster/Rearview Mirror/Compass
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Front Lighting
Active Suspension

556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–

Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557

Cavity
64

Cartridge Fuse
–

65
66
67
68
69
70

–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Natural
10 Amp Red
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
–
–

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

Description
Rear Windows
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Run Sense
Illumination/Rear Sunshade
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamps
Glove Box Lamp – If
Equipped
Door Courtesy

Bulb Number
W5W
562
578
A6220
194
562

Bulb Number
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at AuthoPocket/Cup Holder
rized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam Headlamp
(Standard Halogen)
Low Beam Headlamp –
High Intensity Discharge
(HID)
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp

Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
9005
3157A

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559

Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Front Side Marker
Rear Tail Lamp
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License

Bulb Number
PSX24W
168
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168
3157
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168

BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side Marker
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.

560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn Lamp
— Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561

Backup Lamps

3. Remove cover.

1. Open trunk.

4. Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove.

2. Remove fastener from cover.

5. Reinstall new bulb.
6. Install cover and fastener.

7
Fastener Cover

562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.

Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket

4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
19 Gallons

Metric
72 Liters

7 Quarts

6.6 Liters

15.2 Quarts

14.4 Liters

564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106).
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils
that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The
manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 or equivalent
MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4®
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 brake fluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4, or MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W–90
(API GL-5) in addition to MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear
Additive).

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .570 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .568

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
S driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
C anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
H
E The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
D time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
U
L On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
E
S equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 M

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel

A
I
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or N
T
damage.
E
N
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals A
N
as required.
C
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake E

Once A Month

master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
S
needed.
C

• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
H
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct E
operation.
D
hicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.

U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

At Each Oil Change

Required Maintenance Intervals

• Change the engine oil filter.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 M

6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.